LG | D1420CF | LG D1420CF دليل المالك

OWNER'S MANUAL
DISHWASHER
Please read this manual carefully before operating your
dishwasher. Retain it for future reference.
D1420W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F(B,U)
D1421W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F(B,U)
P/No. : MFL62077123
C
ONTENTS
SAFETY AND CAUTION
3
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
5
PARTS NAME
9
FUNCTION OF CONTROL BUTTON
10
BEFORE USING FOR THE FIRST TIME
13
HOW TO USE AND OPERATE
15
OPERATING SEQUENCE
21
PROGRAM
22
USER MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
23
TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE
24
SPECIFICATION
26
S
AFETY AND CAUTION
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using your dishwasher, follow basic precautions,
including the following:
During use
• Please read this manual carefully before using
the dishwasher for the first time.
• This manual contains very important notes
regarding the installation, use and maintenance
of your dishwasher.
• The manufacturer can not be responsible for
problems caused by ignoring these safety and
caution instructions.
• This dishwasher is designed for normal
household use.
• Do not use the dishwasher for industrial and
commercial use, or other purpose.
• The appliance is not intended for use by young
children or infirm persons without supervision.
• Check packaging and dishwasher immediately
for signs of transport damage. If the appliance
is damaged, do not put it into use but contact
your supplier without delay.
• Only suitable household utensils should be
placed in the dishwasher.
(Please avoid utensils; that are nonheatresistant, metal decorated, etc.)
• Do not use any kinds of solvent in your
dishwasher. They may cause an explosion or
fire.
• Do not spray water on the appliance.
It may cause the failure of electric parts or
electric shock.
• Do not push down or sit on the inner door
when the door opened. It may cause the
deformation or failure of your dishwasher.
• Do not use the detergent for hand washing.
The detergent for dishwasher should be used
for normal operation.
• This appliance is fitted with a safety function
that automatically stops the operation of the
dishwasher when it is exposed to heavy
disturbance on its mains.
• Dishwasher detergents are strongly alkaline.
They can be extremely dangerous if
swallowed. Avoid contact with skin and eyes
and keep children away from the dishwasher
when the door is open.
Check that the detergent receptacle is empty
after completion of the wash cycle.
During installation
• Electrical connection must be in accordance
with the rating label.
• Electrical safety is only guaranteed when the
earth system of your house is in accordance
with the related local regulations.(Do not use
an extension cable or cord.)
• If the hot water exceeds 65ºC, adjust the water
heater setting. If the hot water temperature can
not be maintained below 65ºC, the dishwasher
must be connected to cold water.
• If power supply cord is damaged, it must only
be replaced by the manufacturer or its service
agent or a similar qualified person in order to
avoid a hazard.
• This appliance must be positioned so that the
plug is accessible.
• The appliance is to be connected to the water
mains using new hose-sets and that old hosesets should not be reused.
Child Safety
• Controls may be locked using “Child Lock”
mode to prevent from all the setting from
being changed by a child.
• Keep children away from detergents and rinseaids.
• Do not allow children to operate the
dishwasher.
• Young children should be supervised to ensure
that they do not play with the appliance.
3
S
AFETY AND CAUTION
CAUTION
concerning the Power Cord
Most appliances recommend they be placed upon a dedicated circuit; that is, a single outlet circuit
which powers only that appliance and has no additional outlets or branch circuits. Check the
specification page of this owner's manual to be certain.
Do not overload wall outlets. Overloaded wall outlets, loose or damaged wall outlets, extension cords,
frayed power cords, or damaged or cracked wire insulation are dangerous. Any of these conditions
could result in electric shock or fire. Periodically examine the cord of your appliance, and if its
appearance indicates damage or deterioration, unplug it, discontinue use of the appliance, and have the
cord replaced with an exact replacement part by an authorized servicer.
Protect the power cord from physical or mechanical abuse, such as being twisted, kinked, pinched,
closed in a door, or walked upon. Pay particular attention to plugs, wall outlets, and the point where the
cord exits the appliance.
CAUTION
The instructions shall state the substance of the following :
This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory or
mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they have been given supervision or
instruction concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety.
Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
This appliance must be grounded. In the event of a malfunction or breakdown, grounding will
reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance for electric current. This
appliance is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding
plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is installed and grounded in
accordance with all local codes and ordinances.
WARNING - Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of
electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or service representative if you are in doubt
whether the appliance is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the appliance;
if it will not fit the outlet have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
Disposal of your old appliance
1. When this crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is attached to a product
it means the product is covered by the European Directive
2002/96/EC.
2. All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of
separately from the municipal waste stream via designated
collection facilities appointed by the government or the local
authorities.
3. The correct disposal of your old appliance will help prevent
potential negative consequences for the environment and human
health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance,
please contact your city office, waste disposal service or the shop
where you purchased the product.
4
I
NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
A qualified electrician/plumber or competent person should carry out any electrical/plumbing
work required to install this appliance.
Step 1 :
PREPARE CUPBOARD OPENING
Step 2 :
PREPARATION FOR ELECTICAL WIRING
CAUTION
1 This dishwasher is designed to fit the size
shown as below.
For personal safety, remove house
fuse or open circuit breaker before
installation. Do not use an extension
cord or adapter plug with this
appliance. Electrical and earthing
connections must comply with the
national electrical code/provincial and
municipal code and/or other local
codes.
2 Select a location as close to sink as
possible for ease of connection to the
water and drain pipes.
3 To ensure good drainage, the dishwasher
should not be installed more than 3 meters
away from the sink.
4 If dishwasher is installed in a corner, a
minimum of 5cm of space is required
between the washer and an adjacent
cabinet or wall.
1 This appliance must be supplied with
correct rating voltage and hertz as shown
on instruction manual, and connected to
an individual, properly earthed branch
circuit, protected by a minimum 15 amp
circuit breaker or time delay fuse.
Wiring must be 2 wire with Earth.
2 The power plug must be in a accessible
location adjacent to and not behind the
dishwasher and within 1.2 meters of the
dishwasher side.(See page 7 Fig.A)
3 The power plug must be correctly
earthed, if in doubt, have it checked by a
qualified Electrician. No other appliance
should be connected to the same plug
outlet by a double adapter or similar
plug.
Dangerous voltage
Unit:mm
To indicate hazards arising
from dangerous voltages.
Note – In case of application
in a warning sign the rules
according to ISO 3864 shall
be adhered to.
Any bare wood surrounding the
dishwasher should be sealed with a
waterproof paint or sealant to prevent
swelling.
5
I
NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Step 3 :
PREPARING THE DISHWASHER
FOR INSTALLATION
Step 4 :
INSTALLING THE
DISHWASHER IN CUPBOARD
1 Lay the dishwasher on its back.
1 Before sliding the dishwasher into the
cupboard opening, all necessary height
and balancing adjustments should be
made using a spanner.
2 Adjust the legs to the required height
as shown in below figure.
2 Slide the dishwasher into the cabinet
opening carefully. Make sure that the
drain hose inside the cabinet is not
kinked or stretched.
Adjust
leg
CAUTION
If the height of the cupboard is below
850mm, you should remove the top table
by unscrewing the 2 screws. (Two of rear)
6
I
NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Step 5 :
DRAIN LINE CONNECTION
When the drain hose is connected to a
separate standpipe, it is essential that an
airtight connection be made.
Refer to Fig.B
1 If the end of drain hose does not fit to
the drain line, use a rubber
connector(not supplied) that is
resistant to heat and detergent.
2 This should be available from a
plumbing shop or DIY merchants.
3 There are two typical connections as
shown in Figure A, B.
The “S” trap spigot must be drilled out
cleanly and free of obstruction to its
maximum internal diameter, if used for
drainage.
Fig. B : Drainage connection - stand pipe.
To prevent siphoning, one of the following
methods must be used:
Drain hose Extension
When the drain hose is connected to a
sink “s” trap or waste disposal unit, the
hose must be looped up to the underside
of the bench top and secured.
Extend drain hose as shown below.
CAUTION
Fig. A
When you connect or extend drain hose,
make sure that drain hose is not kinked.
(Bends should have a 40 mm radius.)
7
I
NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Step 6 :
WATER SUPPLY CONNECTION
Step 8 :
HOW TO LEVEL THE DISHWASHER
1 Connect the water supply hose to the
water tap as shown.(Some models
consist of an inlet valve and hose.)
This dishwasher may be fed with either
hot or cold water. If the water can not be
maintained below 65ºC, the dishwasher
must be connected to cold water.
After installing the dishwasher, you may
notice a slight sticking of the door to the
dishwasher, when you open or close the door.
If this does happen you need to adjust the level
of the dishwasher.
Case 1. In case the door is slanted to the right
2 When connecting, the sealant tape or
sealing compound to avoid water leaks.
Make sure that the line is not kinked or
sharply bent.
The new hose-sets supplied with the
appliance are to be used and that old
hose-sets should not be reused.
Fig. C
• If the door slants to the right, see fig, C and
follow these instructions:
1) Unscrew(counter-clockwise) the left leg of
the back side and correct the level.
2) Check the opening of door and repeat if
necessary until the door opens and closes
properly.
• When the product is correctly leveled, There
should be no slant , stickiness or friction
sound.
Water tap
Water supply
hose
Case 2. In case the door is slanted to the left
Step 7 :
FINAL CHECK AND ASSEMBLING
1 Securely hand tighten supply hose to the
water supply.
Plug the power supply cord into an earthed
electrical point and switch on.
Fig. D
2 After installing and prior to using the
dishwasher with crockery, we recommend
that you use the dishwasher on ‘Quick’
mode to rinse through. At this stage it is
useful to ensure that there are no operating
problems or water leaks.
When the dishwasher is used for the first,
there may be a loud noise, if this happens,
turn off the power and restart the
dishwasher.
8
• If the door slants to the left, see fig. D and
follow these instructions:
1) Check the opening of door if there still
remains sticky or friction sound.
2) Check the opening of door and repeat if
necessary until the door opens and closes
properly.
• When the product is correctly leveled, There
should be no slant , stickiness or friction
sound.
P
ARTS NAME
1. Control Panel
2. Door Handle
3. Front Cover
4. Lower Cover
5. Display Window
6. Power Button
7. Drain Hose
8. Inlet Hose
9. Power Cord
10. Adjustable Leg
11. Upper Rack
12. Cutlery Basket
13. Detergent And Rinse Aid Dispenser
14. Vapor Vent Cover
15. Upper Spray Arm
16. Lower Spray Arm
17. Filter ASM
18. Lower Rack
19. Salt Container Cap
20. Cutlery Rack
Funnel
The appearance and specifications may vary without notice.
9
F
UNCTION OF CONTROL BUTTON
MODEL : D1420W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F(B,U)
Program
MODEL : D1421W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F(B,U)
Program
10
UV
Indicator
Time Left
Delay Start
Cool Dry
Indicator
Time Left
Delay Start
Beep On/Off
Spray
Beep On/Off
Spray
11
Rinse
Power
Rinse
Power
Half Load
Child Lock
Half Load
Child Lock
F
UNCTION OF CONTROL BUTTON
Program
• When you want to select program, press this button.
UV
• If you want to sterilize the dishes, press UV button.
• After drying cycle, sterilizer will be performed by UV lamp.
• At this time, “St” code is displayed in display window.
• When you open the door of dishwasher, UV lamp is turned off.
Don’t look at the lamp directly with the naked eye.
Cool Dry
• When you want better drying performance, press this button.
• This process is not part of the program.
• After drying cycle, the fan will operate for a few more minutes to diminish any remaining moisture.
At this time, “Cd” code is displayed in display window.
• If you want, you can open the door and unload the dishes at any time.
Indicator
• Child Lock.
• Refill with special salt.
• Refill with rinse aid.
Time Left
• Before starting, the display window shows the running time of the selected program.
• After starting, the display window shows the remaining time.
• If the dishwasher has a trouble, the trouble type is displayed.
“OE”, “FE”, “IE”, “EI”, “HE”, “CE”, “LE”, “tE”
• If this error letters are displayed, please refer to the trouble shooting guide page 25 and follow the guide.
Beep On/Off
• The dishwasher must be switched on.
• The beep on/off function can be set by pressing the Half Load and Spray button simultaneously for a
few seconds.
Rinse
• Repeated pressing of the Rinse button will select Extra Hot, Rinse+, Extra Hot & Rinse+.
• If you select the Extra Hot function, the operating temperature will be up to 80 . (Dual wash, Auto, Eco)
• When you select Rinse + an additional rinse cycle is added.
Half Load
• In case of small load, use upper or lower rack only to save energy.
• With each press, can select Upper or Lower rack only.
• In case you don’t select this button, the machine always works vario washing, which operate upper and
lower spray arm alternately.
Child Lock
• Used to lock or unlock the control buttons to prevent all the setting from being changed by a child.
• To activate or release the Child Lock function, press the Half Load and Rinse buttons simultaneously for a
few seconds while the dishwasher is in operation.
• All controls will be disabled except the Child Lock and Power buttons.
• Turning off the dishwasher will not reset the Child Lock function. You must release the Child Lock before
you can operate the dishwasher.
Power
• For operating, press this button first for power on.
• After operating, this button automatically switches off for safety and energy saving.
• In case of irregular surge disturbance to the machine, the power may be automatically turned off for safety.
Spray
• With each press, the level of water jet is changed to Strong, Medium and Soft in a sequence.
Delay Start
• If you want to delay the start of selected program, press this button.
• Pressing this button will increase time by 1 hour.
• The delay start time can be adjusted from 1 hour to 19 hours.
12
B
EFORE USING FOR THE FIRST TIME
Hardness setting
You have to check your water hardness and set the softening system level before
operating your dishwasher.
Step 1. Check and find water hardness level
< Water hardness level >
Method 1
1) Check the water hardness of your area.
(Your water utility company can help you with this.)
2) Set the softening system level of your dishwasher
according to the water hardness level.
Refer to the Step 2.
L : Softening system level)
Method 2
1) Check your water hardness by using test strip. (
)
2) Test Procedure
Immerse all reaction zones of the test strip for approx.1sec (not in running water!).
Shake off excess liquid from the strip and wait for 1min.
Then, the green color of the reaction zone will change to the red-violet.
Count the number of red-violet from the strip.
< Water hardness level >
Hardness range
number of
the areas
(red-violet)
°d
°e
°f
mmol/l mg/l
(Ca+Mg) Ca
Water
quality
<7
<9
<12,5
<1,3
<50
soft
7 - 14 9 - 17,5 12,5 - 25 1,3 - 2,5 50 - 100 moderately hard
hard
14 - 21 17,5 - 26 25 - 37 2,5 - 3,8 100 - 150
>21
>26
>37
>3,8
>150
very hard
Softening
system
level
H0, H1
H2, H3
H4, H5
H6, H7
1 °e = 14.25 mg/l CaCO3
1 °f = 10 mg/l CaCO3
1 °d = 10 mg/l CaO (=1,78 °f) (=1,25 °e)
3) Set the softening system level of your dishwasher according to the water hardness level.
Refer to the Step 2.
Step 2. Setting up the softening system level of your dishwasher
Adjust the water softener to the setting to the corresponding hardness of the water in your area.
The water softener has 8 adjustment levels.
The dishwasher is programmed at the factory for a water hardness level of “ ”.
This can be checked and altered by using the buttons on the control panel.
1. First, ensure the dishwasher is switched off.
2. Press UV(Cool Dry) and Power button simultaneously and keep them pressed.
3. To change the setting:
Simply press the UV(Cool Dry) button, then the figure will change one by one.
The display will change between “ ” and “ ”.
4. Once the hardness setting is correctly adjusted, press the Spray button.
The hardness setting is then saved.
13
B
EFORE USING FOR THE FIRST TIME
Step 3. Salt Filling
This model has a water softener to soften hard water.
Please read these notes carefully for correct operation.
In order to provide satisfactory rinsing results, the dishwasher requires soft water, i.e., containing
little or no lime, otherwise water stains will be left behind on the dishes and interior containers.
If the tap water exceeds a certain level of hardness, it must be softened, I.e.,decalcified.
This id achieved by adding a special salt to the water softener inside the dishwasher.
The required amount of salt is set up according to how hard your tap water is.
Filling with Salt
Fill the regenerating salt container before starting the washing program.
Once you have filled with salt you must run the “Pre-wash” or “Quick” course immediately to
remove salt and salt water around the tub in order to prevent corrosion.
• Remove lower rack and unscrew the cap of salt container.
• Before using your dishwasher for the first time, it is necessary
to Pour 1.5kg of salt and 1 liter of water in to the container.
Use a funnel for ease and clean filling, ensuring that coarse salt
or regenerating salt intended for dishwashers is used.
• After filling, wipe off any spilled salt to seal the cap properly.
• Screw the cap tightly to prevent any suds from penetrating into
the container.
Step 4. Adding Rinse Aid
For filling
To fill the Rinse Aid chamber, rotate the round cap counter clockwise and remove. Fill the container
to the maximum level with a good quality Rinse Aid, then replace and lock the cap.
The Rinse Aid is automatically dispensed during the final rinse cycle.
The dosage is factory set to suit most installations. If, after washing, you notice cloudy spots, streaks
or water marks on your glassware, it may be necessary to increase the setting. To do this, remove the
cap and rotate the indicator arrow to a higher setting then replace the cap . If the glasses are smeared
or foam is present on the bottom of the glass or the bottom of the machine, select a lower setting.
14
H
OW TO USE AND OPERATE
1. Loading your Dishwasher
Knife, fork, and spoon handles should be
positioned between the tines.
For better washing performance, always load
the dishwasher according to the instructions.
Before loading items into the dishwasher clean
off large particles of food, in particular
insoluble items such as bones, pips, etc.
When loading the dishwasher, please act
accordingly:
Position crockery such that water will
contact all surfaces.
Deep based items should be placed at an
angle to help water run off and dry properly.
Items with burnt on food should be soaked
prior to loading in the dishwasher.
If the handles of your flatware are too thick,
then reverse the pieces so the handles face the
other direction as shown in the bottom figure.
Height Adjustable tray
Each side tray can be adjusted independently to
a high or low position to accommodate
different sizes of utensils or cutlery.
Each tray is adjusted by lifting it out and
rotating it front to back.
2. Loading the cutlery Rack
The cutlery rack is best suited for flatware and
most cooking or serving utensils.
The separators on the cutlery racks help keep
flatware separated to avoid damage and
improve cleaning.
Removable Cutlery Rack
Loading examples (Energy test)
The entire cutlery rack can be removed if more
space is needed on the upper rack for larger
items.
NOTE :
Always remove cutlery from the rack before
removing the rack.
15
H
OW TO USE AND OPERATE
Loading examples (Energy test)
Pull the rack out to the end of the rails, then lift
the front of the rack so the rollers clear the stop
on the end of the rail. The rack can now be
slid forward and removed from the rails.
WARNING
Be careful when loading and unloading
sharp-edged items. Load sharp knives
with the blade down in order to reduce
the risk of injury.
3. Using the Cutlery Basket
Cutlery should be mixed within each section
of the cutlery basket to prevent nesting of
similar items. Place the cutlery in the cover
with the handles down. The cover can be
hinged and clipped away from the basket if
you choose not to use them.
Place knives in the separate rack for located in
the top of the dishwasher.
Take care when loading and unloading
sharp items.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WARNING
Knives and other utensils with sharp
points must be loaded in the basket with
their points down or placed in a
horizontal position.
How to use
4. Loading the Lower Rack
The lower basket is best loaded with dinner
plates, soup bowls, dishes, pots, pans, lids and
even the grill tray.
Plates should be positioned upright and facing
the centre of the rack and pots, pans and large
dishes must be turned upside down.
Slide two baskets in opposite directions, then
pull them apart.
16
H
OW TO USE AND OPERATE
How to use
How to use
Fold-down dividers at the lower and the upper
rack can be lowered to improve stacking of
pots and pans.
Loading examples (Energy test)
c
d
d
Fold-down dividers at the upper rack can be
lowered to improve stacking of dishes.
e
d
Loading examples (Energy test)
g
d
f
d
f
b
a
d
a
d
g
Milk
Egg
f
d
b
e
e
Tea
Oat
c
f
Meat
Spinach
b
Margarine
a
d
g
Take care not to obstruct the rotation of the
spray arms and ensure that large items do not
prevent the detergent dispenser lid from
opening.
5. Loading the Upper Rack
It is best to load this with more delicate items
such as, small plates, long cutlery, cups, glasses
and dishwasher safe plastic items. Plates should
be positioned upwards with the plate bottom
facing the front of the rack.
Cups, glasses and bowls must be positioned
upside down.
Extra cups or cooking utensils can be laid on
the fold down cup racks, which also provides
support for long stem glasses.
Take care not to obstruct the rotation of the
spray arm under the upper rack.
Milk
Egg
c
b
e
Tea
Oat
f
c
f
Meat
Spinach
Margarine
Non Dishwasher Safe Items
The combination of high water temperatures and
dishwasher detergent may damage particular items,
therefore we do not recommend using the
dishwasher to wash the following:
■ Copper or anodized aluminum
■ Hand painted silver or gold leaf crockery
■ Wood or bone handled utensils
■ Iron or non rust proof utensils
■ Plastic items that which are not dishwasher safe.
17
H
OW TO USE AND OPERATE
6. Adjusting the Upper Rack
WARNING
Before adjusting, ensure the rack is
empty of all crockery.
Otherwise crockery may be damaged
or you may be injured.
Your upper rack can be raised or lowered to
cater for different sized crockery. Before
adjusting, ensure that the rack is empty.
You can change the position of the upper rack
by lifting the rack upward, into the upper
position, or by pulling on the two levers on
either side of the rack to move it down to its
lower position.
7. Adding Detergent
• Detergent must be put into the detergent
chamber before starting every program except
the Pre Wash.
• Please follow the manufacturer’s instructions
within the manual, when determining the correct
amount of detergent to use.
• If your dishes are moderately dirty, you may use
slightly less detergent than recommended.
• Chambers hold 15g and 25g.
• The amount of detergent required depends on
the program. Please refer to the guide table.
We recommend that where possible the upper
rack remains level.
And when you pull the rack upward, hold the
middle location of the upper rack
(
marked position)
After adjusting the rack levels, check
that the spray arm is free to rotate.
PROGRAM
AMOUNT OF DETERGENT
Dual Wash
25g
Auto
20g
Eco
15g
Gentle
15g
Quick
10g
Pre Wash
No detergent
• After the detergent is supplied, the chamber
lid should be closed.
• The detergent is dispensed automatically
during the operation.
• The chamber lid remains open after
operation.
Detergent Information
Use only the detergent intended for
household dishwashers. (Ordinary handwashing detergent should not be used,
because the foam can interfere with proper
operation.)
18
H
OW TO USE AND OPERATE
8. Refilling
Push latch to open
For refilling Rinse Aid
Depending on the dosage setting and the
number of washes, the chamber may need to
be topped up, approximately once a month.
The rinse aid level can be checked by two
methods.
• By the indicator window on the dispenser
when the dishwasher door is fully open.
● Black indicates sufficient Rinse Aid
O Clear indicates Rinse Aid required
Place proper
detergent into this
compartment
WARNING
The detergent used is a special
Dishwasher detergent and like all
household chemicals it should be
treated as harmful and kept out of
reach of children. After completion of
the wash program, the detergent
compartment should be checked and
any remaining detergent removed.
• By the light on the control panel, being lit,
when the dishwasher is working on.
When the lamp is lit, it means the rinse
aid is almost empty. Refill the Rinse Aid
chamber as soon as possible.
ATTENTION
Using combined detergent products
(ex.3 in 1)
Some products integrated rinse aid
work best specific programs only.
Yow will obtain optimum rinsing and
drying results by using conventional
and separate salt and rinse aid.
Products that replace regeneration salt
can only be used within a specific
water hardness range.
Please contact the detergent
manufacturer if the drying performance
is very poor or you find the white film,
when you use the combined detergent
products.
We do not warrant the complaints that
are directly related to the use of these
products.
Rinse Aid Information
Rinse Aid is necessary to remove spots and
streaks from dishes as well as improved
drying. Using the correct amount will improve
wash performance. However, using too much
can produce excess foam leading to possible
water leaks.
19
H
OW TO USE AND OPERATE
9. Drying
For refilling Salt
When the salt container is empty, the salt refill
lamp will automatically turn on during
operation. The salt should be refilled after the
cycle has finished. We recommended the salt
refill should always be carried out, as
mentioned previous page, prior to starting the
next operation. This will immediately thin and
drain away any excess salt solution.
■ To assist drying, we recommend that the
door be fully opened after the cycle.
10. Energy Test(EN50242)
■ Appliance loaded in accordance with
standard specifications.
• Example of loaded dishwasher : p.15~17
• Capacity : 14 place settings
• Comparability course : Eco
• Rinse Aid setting : 4
• Reference cleaner : 8g of detergent onto the
inside surface of the door and fill 27g into
the detergent dispenser.
• Height-adjustable Rack-U must be inserted
into the uppermost position.
When the lamp is lit, this means that the
salt aid is almost empty. Refill the Salt
Aid chamber as soon as possible.
Note
• After filling with salt, it may take a little
while before the indicator light turns off.
• When the control is set to “ ”, it is not
necessary to fill up with salt as no salt is
consumed while the dishwasher is
operating. If the control is set between
“ ” and “ ”, then salt must be added
to the dispenser.
WARNING
Do not pour detergent into the salt
container. This will destroy the water
softener.
20
O
PERATING SEQUENCE
The time in the display window will start
to decrease minute by minute.
If the door is opened during the program
a safety device ensures that the machine
stops.
Once the door is re-closed the program
will start from where it was interrupted.
Press the “Power” button
Check there is rinse aid
and salt
The corresponding indicator lights will
illuminate if refilling is required.
At the end of the
washing program
Open the door and check
the filters
“End”is displayed on the digital display
and a buzzer sounds.
And the dishwasher automatically
switches off for safety and energy saving
later.
Ensure they are clean and properly
positioned (See “User Maintenance
Instructions”).
Load the dishes
If you select “UV” function, the dishwasher
automatically switches off after sterilizing
action.
Remove any excess food.
Pull the lower rack out and arrange the
dishes and cutlery.
Pull the upper rack out and arrange the
cups, glasses, etc.
If you selected “Cool Dry” function, the
display then shows “Cd” to indicate that
the dishwasher is in “Cool Dry” mode.
And then the dishwasher automatically
switches off later.
CAUTION
Do not load the items in upper rack with
the lower rack is pulled out and loaded.
CAUTION
Empty the lower rack first and then the
upper one;this will avoid water dripping
from the upper rack onto the dishes
below.
Ensure the spray arms can
freely rotate
Measure out detergent
Add the required amount of detergent into
the dispenser and close the lid.
WARNING
In general it is not advisable to open
the door while the machine is working.
If the door is opened, a safety device
ensures that the machine stops.
Care must be taken if the door is
opened during the hot phase or
immediately after a program has
finished, as steam may escape.
Setting and starting the
program
Press the program button to select the
desired program.
After 5 seconds, the machine will start.
If necessary, select the option function
corresponding to the desired program.
The indicator lights of the program and all
the phases of the program will come on.
Before starting, the display window shows
the running time of the selected program.
After starting, the display window shows
the remaining time.
CAUTION
That the door should not be left in the
open position since this could present a
tripping hazard.
21
P
ROGRAM
Running time may vary according to the water temperature, water pressure and voltage.
Running time doesn’t include “Cool Dry - 30min”.
Program
Dual Wash
Auto
WASH
Pre Wash Main Wash
40
RINSE
Rinse 1
Rinse 2
Rinse 3
60
Heating
Rinse
DRY
COOL
DRY
70
The program sequence is optimized and adapted in accordance with how dirty the
dishes are.
Eco
Gentle
Quick
43
60
45
70
50
50
65
Pre Wash
Dual Wash
and water consumption for a good washing
performance. It is recommended that it will be
used every time.
This program is ideal for very dirty crockery, in
particular pots, pans and casserole dishes.
This program will be able to control the water jet
level of each spray arm differently.
Gentle
This program is for washing delicate items like
glasses.
Auto
During the Auto program, the degree of soiling
in the dishes is determined by the amount of
clouding of the water.
According the degree of soiling, the program
automatically adjust the washing time,
temperature. As a result, the energy and water
consumption is kept as low as possible. The “F”
on display means that the sensor is sensing the
status of the dishwasher.
Quick
Can use for lightly soiled recently used dishes
and cutlery.
When you select “Quick” program, After
finishing, “Cool Dry” function is automatically
performed for the better drying result.
Pre Wash
Eco
Can use this program for only removing soil
before washing dishes by hand.
This program offers the most efficient energy
Auto Restart
If the dishwasher is turned off by a power failure, it will restart from the position it stopped at
adjusting accordingly when you press the Power button again.
22
U
SER MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
To prevent trouble and poor operating, it is important to check filters and spray
arms at regular intervals.
Filters
Lower Spray Arm
• Remove the lower rack first.
• Turn the mesh filter counterclockwise.
• Take out the mesh filter, upper STS filter
and outer filter.
• Clean them if necessary.
• Replace them in the reverse order.
• Check that the water jet holes are not
blocked.
• If cleaning is required, remove the arm by
pulling up.
• Clean the spray arm and replace it pulling
down.
mesh filter
upper STS filter
outer filter
Upper Spray Arm
• Pull the upper rack forwards.
• Check that the water jet holes are not
blocked.
• If cleaning is required, remove the arm by
unscrewing the nut.
• Clean the spray arm and replace it in the
reverse order.
After each cycle, clean the filter for
the better washing result.
Before starting, check that the filter is
assembled well. If the filter is not
assembled correctly, you might have
a poor cleaning result.
23
T
ROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE
■ If a problem occurs check below to see whether this can be solved.
■ In the unlikely event that the problem cannot be rectified, please contact a
service engineer.
Problem
Possible Causes
Solution
No lights come on when
the power is turned on.
• Plug is not properly inserted into
the socket.
• Fuses blown or circuit breaker
tripped.
• The electricity of the house was
cut off.
• Check the plug.
• Check the electricity.
• Call for service.
The machine does not
start.
• Door is not fully closed.
• The start button is not pressed.
• Close the door.
• Press the start button.
The spray arms do not
rotate smoothly.
• The mounting of the spray arms is
blocked by food particles.
• Clean the holes of the
spray arm.
White deposits are left
on the dishwasher after
washing.
• The amount of detergent or rinseaid set incorrectly.
• The salt container is empty.
• The salt container cap is not
securely screwed on.
• Check the detergent
or rinse-aid.
• Check the salt
container or cap.
Streaks are left on
glassware.
• Too little Rinse-Aid dispensed.
Dry results are not
satisfactory.
• Too little Rinse-Aid dispensed.
Washing results are not
satisfactory.
• Incorrect amount of detergent.
• Utensils incorrectly arranged or
overloaded.
• Filters are clogged.
• Water jet holes of spray arms
blocked.
• Spray arm's rotation obstructed by
utensils.
• Unsuitable program selected.
24
• Fill the rinse-aid.
• Adjust the level of
rinse-aid container.
T
ROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE
Problem
Possible Causes
Solution
The display shows "OE"
code. (Water is not
pumped away.)
• The drain hose is kinked.
• The filter is clogged.
• Motor trouble.
(Washing motor or Drain motor)
• Straighten hose(s).
• Clean the filter.
• If you can not solve
the problem, call for
service.
The display shows "IE"
code.
• Water is not supplied.
• Water tap is not opened.
• Water sensor has a trouble.
• Check the water tap.
• If you can not solve
the problem, call for
service.
The display shows "EI"
code.
(Automatically Drain
pump operated.)
• Water is leaking from the hose
connections.
• Damage to the unit has been
caused by a water leak.
The display shows "FE"
code. (Automatically
Drain pump operated.)
• Excessive water is supplied than
the normal water level.
• There is a problem with the inlet
valve.
The display shows "HE"
code.
• The water heater circuit is damaged.
The display shows "tE"
code.
• Thermistor trouble or very high inlet
water temperature.
The display shows "LE"
code.
• Motor trouble.
The display shows "CE"
code.
• Motor trouble.
25
• Close the water tap
and unplug the power
plug.
• Call for service.
S
PECIFICATION
D1420W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F
D1421W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F
D1420W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)B
D1421W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)B
600mm
598mm
600mm
567mm
850mm
819mm
D1420W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)U
D1421W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)U
598mm
567mm
819mm
Capacity
14 Place settings
Weight
See rating label
Power Supply
See rating label
Power Consumption
See rating label
Water Feed Pressure
50 ~ 800 kPa
26
M EMO
27
You may also find user manual in video version at following link
www.guidelg.com/dishwasher
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫)‪D1420W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A) F(B,U‬‬
‫)‪D1421W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A) F(B,U‬‬
‫‪P/No. : MFL62077123‬‬
‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺬﺭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣ ﹼﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﹼ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ ‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣ ﹼﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣ ﹼﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺬﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻤﻤﺖ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺯﻉ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﳌﺎ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ )ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٦٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﻬﹼ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﺮﺍﻃﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ )ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﺵ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﲡﻠﺲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﻮ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﻐﺴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻗﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻪ‪ ،‬ﲡﻨﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ »ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‬
‫)‪ «(child lock‬ﳌﻨﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳉﻠﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺸﻐﻠﻮﺍ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺒﺜﻮﺍ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺬﺭ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌ ﹼﻠﻖ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﲤﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﳌﺂﺧﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻔﻜﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﶈﺮﻭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻤﺰﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍ‪‬ﺪﻭﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﺮﺍﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻳﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳋﻠﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻨﹼﻲ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻘﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺮﻗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺄﻩ ﺑﻘﺪﻣﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﳊﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺂﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺁﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺼﻤﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺻﺮﺓ )ﲟﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳋﺒﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﲢﺖ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺒﺜﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ(‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﰎ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﲟﻘﺒﺲ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺳﻠﻚ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ ‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻨﹼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﺬ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﳌﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃ ﹼﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺑﻴﺔ ‪. EC / ٩٦ / ٢٠٠٢‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺭﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻠﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻤﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﳝﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺑﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﲟﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻠﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺨﺘﺺ )ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪:٢‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪:١‬‬
‫ﲢﻀﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﺰﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﺯﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﹰ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﲤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻮﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺰﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪٨٧٠-٨٦٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﭭﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪ ١٥‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻠﻜﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ١٫٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ )ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺁ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻬﺮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻄﻊ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﲔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺍﻃﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪(٧٥ X ١٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٥‬‬‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻪ – ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺰﻭ‬
‫‪. ٣٨٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺩﻫﻦ ﺍﳋﺸﺐ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺑﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﲟﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺎﺫ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﳋﺸﺐ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪: ٤‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪: ٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﺰﻥ‬
‫ﲢﻀﻴﺮ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﻬﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﳑﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺰﺍﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٥٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮ ﺑﺮﻏﻴﲔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻴﲔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪٦٠٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ ٨٧٠-٨٦٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪-٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪: ٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﻴﺘﲔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ ﺍ ﻭ ﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﳋﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ s‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٤٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﳌﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻌﺐ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺏ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ‪ -‬ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺒﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ » ‪ « S‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎ ﻭﻭﺻﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫‪ ٧٧٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪ ٧٧٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ ١٠٠٠/‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺩ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﻧﺤﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫‪ ٧٧٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ ١٠٠٠/‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﳋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ( ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﳋﺮﺩﺍﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ ٠٢-٦١‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺎﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﺘﻮﺍﺋﻪ‪) .‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻲ ﺍﳋﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ ٠٤‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪: ٦‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪: ٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺻﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺗﺘﻜ ﹼﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﳋﺮﻃﻮﻡ( ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺩ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺮﺍﻃﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺮﺍﻃﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺝ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺝ ‪ ،‬ﻛ ﹼﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺭﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻰ )ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻋﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻴﻼﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻨﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪: ٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆ ﹼﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺩ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻛ ﹼﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺭﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻰ )ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻋﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻴﻼﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﺴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ »ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫)‪ «(Quick‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺿﺠﻴﺠﺎ ﹰ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺭﺟﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺭﻑ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫‪ .١٤‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .١٥‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‬
‫‪Accessories‬ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ .١٦‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫‪ .١٧‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ‬
‫‪ .١٨‬ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫‪ .١٩‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ‬
‫‪ .٢٠‬ﺭﻑ‬
‫‪First‬‬
‫‪filling‬‬
‫‪Refilling‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫)‪D1420W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A) F(B, U‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪UU‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪UV‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪D1421W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A) F(B, U‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫• ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪UV‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ »‪.«UV‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻘﻤﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﳌﺒﺔ »‪.«UV‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ »‪ «St‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﳌﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺎﺏ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻄﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫»‪ «Cd‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻣﻸ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﺢ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻣﻸ ﲟﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫»‪«tE» ، «LE» ، «CE» ، «HE» ، «EI» ، «IE» ، «FE» ، «OE‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Half Load‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﻤﻞ( ﻭﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) Spray‬ﺍﻟﺮﺵ( ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻭﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫• ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜ ﹼﺮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Extra Hot‬ﺳﺎﺧﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ(‪) Rinse+ ،‬ﺷﻄﻒ‪،(+‬‬
‫‪) Rinse+ & Extra Hot‬ﺳﺎﺧﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻭﺷﻄﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ »‪) Extra Hot‬ﺳﺎﺧﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ(« ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ٨٠‬ﹾ ﻡ ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ »‪) Rinse+‬ﺷﻄﻒ ‪ ، «(+‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﻄﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ‪) Upper‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Lower‬ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ( ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻳﺎﻟﻐﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺤ ﹼﺮﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) Child Lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪) Half Load‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﳊﻤﻞ( ﻭ‪) Rinse‬ﺷﻄﻒ(‬
‫ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪) Child Lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ( ﻭ‪) Power‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) Child Lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﻮﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺵ‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪) Strong‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Medium‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Soft‬ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٩‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﹼﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﺇﻓﺤﺼﻲ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫>ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ<‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.(١‬ﲢﻘﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫)ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫‪.(٢‬ﺇﺿﺒﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﺇﺭﺟﻌﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫)‪ : * L‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ (‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.(١‬ﲢﻘﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.(٢‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻤﺴﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ!(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺰﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺀ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮﻱ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫>ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ<‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪-‬ﺑﻨﻔﺴﺠﻲ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫‪d°‬‬
‫>‪7‬‬
‫‪14 - 7‬‬
‫‪21 - 14‬‬
‫<‪21‬‬
‫‪e°‬‬
‫‪f°‬‬
‫‪mmol/l‬‬
‫)‪(Ca+Mg‬‬
‫‪mg/l‬‬
‫‪Ca‬‬
‫>‪50‬‬
‫>‪1,3‬‬
‫>‪12,5‬‬
‫>‪9‬‬
‫‪100 - 50 2,5 - 1,3 25 - 12,5 17,5 - 9‬‬
‫‪150 - 100 3,8 - 2,5 37 - 25 26 - 17,5‬‬
‫<‪150‬‬
‫<‪3,8‬‬
‫<‪37‬‬
‫<‪26‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺴﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ‬
‫‪H0, H1‬‬
‫‪H2, H3‬‬
‫‪H4, H5‬‬
‫‪H6, H7‬‬
‫‪1°e = 14.25 mg/l CaCO3‬‬
‫‪1°f = 10 mg/l CaCO3‬‬
‫‪(1°d = 10 mg/l CaO (=1,78°f) (=1,25°e‬‬
‫‪.(٣‬ﺇﺿﺒﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﺇﺭﺟﻌﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺴﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﰎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺴﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ » « ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭﻱ ‪)Cool Dry)UV‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ(( ﻭ ‪) Power‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺃﺑﻘﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪)Cool Dry)UV‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ(( ﻭﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﲔ » « ﻭ » «‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪) Spray‬ﺍﻟﺮﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﹼﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻤﻌﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺷﻄﻒ ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺤﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻻﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﱘ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﻘﻌﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺀ ﹼ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻴﺴﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻋﺴﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﹼ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺣﺔ ﻋﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻠﺌﻲ ﻭﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺋﻪ ﺑﺎﳌﻠﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ »ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ« ﺃﻭ »ﺳﺮﻳﻊ« ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻮﺽ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺼﺐ ‪١٫٥‬‬
‫ﻛﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﺢ ﻭ‪ ١‬ﻟﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﻊ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺁﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﻗﻢ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺢ ﰎ ﺗﺴﺮﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﳌﻞﺀ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﲟﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻘﻪ ﺟﻴﺪﺍﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﺀ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺟﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﻏﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﹼ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﻋﻖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﲔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﹼ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﻭﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺨﺎﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﲤﻜﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﺟﻔﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻧﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻃﻌﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻔﻠﻄﺤﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺳﻤﻴﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ‬
‫ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻔﻠﻄﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻬﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﹸﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺭﻓﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻔﻠﻄﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﲢﺴﲔ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ )ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﻚ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻚ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠ ﹰﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﻤﻞ )ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺒﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻥ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺒﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺔ ﳌﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 3 4 5 6 7‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺪﺑﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺓ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻘﻼﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻘﻼﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺘﲔ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺛﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻃﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺰﺍﻝ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ )ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ )ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺣﻠﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ b‬ﺷﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ d‬ﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﻓﺎﻥ‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﳊﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ a‬ﺣﻠﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ b‬ﺷﺎﻱ‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﳊﻮﻡ‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﺎﻧﺦ‬
‫‪ d‬ﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺷﻮﻓﺎﻥ‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﺎﻧﺦ‬
‫‪ g‬ﺳﻤﻨﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ g‬ﺳﻤﻨﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﹼ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺰﻳﺞ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﻌﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺤﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﳌﻴﻨﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺨﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺸﺐ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﻏﺴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺟﲔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺆﻭﺱ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﻐﺴﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺟﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺆﻭﺱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺟﲔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺟﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺭﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺨﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻓﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﻀﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻀﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺈﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻑ ﻧﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﻪ(‬
‫)‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺣ ﹼﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ )‪.(Pre Wash‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ٥١‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻭ‪ ٥٢‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫‪)Dual Wash‬ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪)Auto‬ﺍﻵﻟﻲ(‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪)Eco‬ﺍﻳﻜﻮ(‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪)Gentle‬ﻟﻄﻴﻒ(‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪)Quick‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪)Pre Wash‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺌﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻏﺴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳉﻠﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﹴ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﲢﻄﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺑﺄﺫﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻻﺝ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺧﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺏ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺠﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻓﻌﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ(‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺧﺎﺹ ﹼ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﳊﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻒ ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﺮﺍﹰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻗﺎﺭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﻳﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﻄﻒ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﳑﺘﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﻠﺢ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﳝﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺴﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﲟﺼﻨﹼﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺳﻴﺌﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻻ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺇ ﹼﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻏﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻮ ﹼﻟﺪ ﺭﻏﻮﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺎ ﹰ ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻞﺀ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻨﺼﺢ‬
‫ﲟﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺢ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ)‪(EN٥٠٢٤٢‬‬
‫ﰎ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﶈﻤﻠﺔ« ﺹ ‪١٧-١٥‬‬
‫• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﹼ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﹼ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟـ ‪ ١٤‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﹰ‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻜﻮ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪٤ :‬‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻒ‪ ٨ :‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﻣﻞﺀ ‪ ٢٧‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻒ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ U‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻍ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﺌﻪ ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﳑﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻟﻴﻄﻔﺊ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ » « ﻓﻼ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﳌﻞﺀ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﲔ » « ﻭ‬
‫» « ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺰﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻠﻒ ﹼ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ »ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪«(Power‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻠﺢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ End‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺯﻣﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﺗﹼﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺭﺗﹼﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺟﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺆﻭﺱ‬
‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ »‪ ، «UV‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﹼ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫»‪ ،«Cool Dry‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ »‪ «Cd‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ”‪ “Cool Dry‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﹼ‬
‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺊ ﻓﻲ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺫﺭﻉ‬
‫ﺭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻭﻣﻦ ﹼ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﳝﻨﻊ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻥ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﺢ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺎﺏ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﳊﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﹰ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﳌﺎ ﻗﺪ ﳝﺜﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ "ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ )‪ (Cool Dry‬ﻭﻫﻮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪Dual Wash‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫)ﺍﻵﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٤٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٧٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫‪Eco‬‬
‫)ﺍﻳﻜﻮ(‬
‫‪Gentle‬‬
‫)ﻟﻄﻴﻒ(‬
‫‪Quick‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫‪ ٤٣‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٤٥‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٧٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٦٥‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪Pre Wash‬‬
‫)ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻄﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺎﺭﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺭﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻐﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺆﻭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ »ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ« ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻌﻜﺮ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺎﳝﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ »‪ «F‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻏﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻜﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻏﺴﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﹰﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﹼ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Power‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺗﺮ ﻭﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺑﺨﺎﺧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﻔﺎﺓ ‪ STS‬ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﻋﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺗﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺎﺥ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﻭﺃﻋﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ‬
‫‪mesh filter‬‬
‫‪upper‬‬
‫‪STS filter‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﻔﺎﺓ ‪STS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪outer filter‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﺄﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻏﺴﻴﻞ ﺳﻲﺀ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺎﺥ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﻭﺃﻋﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪Upper spray arm‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻞ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻳﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻝ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪،‬‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ )ﻓﻴﻮﺯ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤ ﹼﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﺑﺬﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺵ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ • ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻣﻸ ﲟﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻞ ﻏﻲ ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺵ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺭﺵ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ »‪.«OE‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ(‬
‫• ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﺜﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﶈ ﹼﺮﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ )ﻣﺤ ﹼﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺸﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤ ﹼﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﺮﻃﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﹼ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﻼ ﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺇﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«IE‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺍﹰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﻼ ﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺇﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«EI‬‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺴ ﹼﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«FE‬‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«HE‬‬
‫• ﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺴﺨﲔ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«tE‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«LE‬‬
‫• ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﲟﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﶈ ﹼﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«CE‬‬
‫• ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﶈ ﹼﺮﻙ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺗﺼﻞ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪D1420W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F‬‬
‫‪D1421W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F‬‬
‫‪D1420W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)B‬‬
‫‪D1421W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)B‬‬
‫‪ ٨٩٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥٩٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥٦٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٨١٩‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٨٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪D1420W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)U‬‬
‫‪D1421W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)U‬‬
‫‪ ٥٩٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺰ ﹼﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻇﻐﻂ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫‪ ٨٠٠~ ٥٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ٥٦٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٨١٩‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬
‫‪www.guidelg.com/dishwasher‬‬
Download PDF